KDC-X700BT
CD-RECEIVER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
© 2014 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 1
GET0973-001A (MW/M0)
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:41:59 PM
CONTENTS
BEFORE USE
BEFORE USE
2
BASICS
3
GETTING STARTED
4
RADIO
5
CD / USB / iPod
6
AUX
8
Pandora®
9
BLUETOOTH®
10
AUDIO SETTINGS
15
DISPLAY SETTINGS
16
MORE INFORMATION
16
TROUBLESHOOTING
17
SPECIFICATIONS
18
INSTALLATION /
CONNECTION
20
How to read this manual
• Operations are explained mainly
using buttons on the faceplate.
• [XX] indicates the selected items.
• ( XX) indicates references are
available on the stated page.
Warning
Do not operate any function that takes your attention away from safe driving.
Caution
Volume setting:
• Adjust the volume so that you can hear sounds outside the car to prevent accidents.
• Lower the volume before playing digital sources to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
General:
• Avoid using the USB device or iPod/iPhone if it might hinder safe driving.
• Make sure all important data has been backed up. We shall bear no responsibility for any loss of recorded
data.
• Never put or leave any metallic objects (such as coins or metal tools) inside the unit, to prevent a short
circuit.
• If a disc error occurs due to condensation on the laser lens, eject the disc and wait for the moisture to
evaporate.
Remote control (RC-406):
• Do not leave the remote control in hot places such as on the dashboard.
• The Lithium battery is in danger of explosion if replaced incorrectly. Replace it only with the same or
equivalent type.
• The battery pack or batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
• Keep the battery out of reach of children and in its original packaging when not in used. Dispose of used
batteries promptly. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately.
Maintenance
Cleaning the unit: Wipe off dirt on the faceplate with a dry silicone or soft cloth.
Cleaning the connector: Detach the faceplate and clean the connector
gently with a cotton swab, being careful not to damage the connector.
Handling discs:
• Do not touch the recording surface of the disc.
Connector (on the reverse
• Do not stick tape etc. on the disc, or use a disc with tape stuck on it.
side of the faceplate)
• Do not use any accessories for the disc.
• Clean from the center of the disc and move outward.
• Clean the disc with a dry silicone or soft cloth. Do not use any solvents.
• When removing discs from this unit, pull them out horizontally.
• Remove burrs from the center hole and disc edge before inserting a disc.
2
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 2
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:01 PM
BASICS
Faceplate
Remote control (RC-406)
Volume knob
(turn/press)
Display window
Remote sensor (Do not expose
to bright sunlight.)
Pull out the
insulation sheet
when using for the
first time.
Detach button
Attach
Detach
How to replace the battery
How to reset
Your preset
adjustments will also
be erased.
To
Do this (on the faceplate)
Do this (on the remote control)
Turn on the power
Press B SRC.
• Press and hold to turn off the power.
Press and hold SRC to turn off the power.
( Pressing SRC does not turn on the power. )
Adjust the volume
Turn the volume knob.
Press VOL or VOL .
Press ATT during playback to attenuate the sound.
• Press again to cancel.
Select a source
Press B SRC repeatedly.
Press SRC repeatedly.
Change the display
information
Press DISP SCRL repeatedly.
• Press and hold to scroll the current display information.
( not available )
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 3
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
3
9/12/2013 3:42:01 PM
GETTING STARTED
Default: XX
AUDIO CONTROL
SP SELECT
OFF/ 5/4/ 6 × 9/6/ OEM: Selects according to the speaker size (5 inches
or 4 inches, 6×9 inches or 6 inches) or OEM speakers for optimum
performance.
DISPLAY
1
EASY MENU
Cancel the demonstration
When you turn on the power (or after you reset the unit), the display
shows: “CANCEL DEMO” “PRESS” “VOLUME KNOB”
1 Press the volume knob.
[YES] is selected for the initial setup.
2 Press the volume knob again.
“DEMO OFF” appears.
2
TUNER SETTING
PRESET TYPE
NORMAL: Memorizes one station for each preset button in each band
(FM1/ FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2). ; MIX: Memorizes one station for
each preset button, regardless of the selected band.
SYSTEM
Set the clock
1
2
3
4
Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK], then press the knob.
Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK ADJUST], then press the knob.
Turn the volume knob to make the settings, then press the knob.
Day Hour Minute
5 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK FORMAT], then press the knob.
6 Turn the volume knob to select [12H] or [24H], then press the knob.
7 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
3
ON: Both display and button illumination change to white color when
entering [FUNCTION]. ; OFF: Both display and button illumination
remain as [COLOR SELECT] color. ( 16)
KEY BEEP
ON: Activates the keypress tone. ; OFF: Deactivates.
TDF ALARM
ON: Activates the alarm if you forget to detach the faceplate when ACC is
set to OFF. ; OFF: Deactivates.
SOURCE SELECT
PANDORA SRC
ON: Enables PANDORA in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 9)
BUILT-IN AUX
ON: Enables AUX in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 8)
CD READ
1: Automatically distinguishes between audio file disc and music CD. ;
2: Forces to play as an music CD. No sound can be heard if an audio file
disc is played.
F/W UPDATE
Set the initial settings
UPDATE SYSTEM / UPDATE BT
1 Press B SRC to enter STANDBY.
2 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
F/W UP xx.xx
YES: Starts upgrading the firmware. ; NO: Cancels (upgrading is not
activated).
For details on how to update the firmware, see:
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
4 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
4
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 4
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:01 PM
RADIO
Direct Access Tuning (using RC-406)
1 Press DIRECT to enter Direct Access Tuning.
2 Press the number buttons to enter a frequency.
3 Press ENT IW to search for a station.
• To cancel, press or DIRECT.
• If no operation is done for 10 seconds after step 2, Direct Access Tuning
is automatically canceled.
Search for a station
1 Press B SRC to select TUNER.
2 Press J BAND repeatedly (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406) to
select FM1/ FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2.
3 Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406) to search for a
station.
• To change the searching method for S / T: Press K SEEK
repeatedly.
AUTO1: Automatically search for a station.
AUTO2: Search for a preset station.
MANUAL: Manually search for a station.
• To store a station: Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
• To select a stored station: Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) (or
press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) on RC-406).
Other settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
Default: XX
TUNER SETTING
LOCAL SEEK
ON: Searches only MW/ SW1/ SW2 stations with good reception. ;
OFF: Cancels.
AUTO MEMORY
YES: Automatically starts memorizing 6 stations with good
reception. ; NO: Cancels. (Selectable only if [NORMAL] is selected for
[PRESET TYPE].) ( 4)
MONO SET
ON: Improves the FM reception, but the stereo effect may be lost. ;
OFF: Cancels.
NEWS SET
ON: The unit will temporarily switch to News Programme if available. ;
OFF: Cancels.
REGIONAL
ON: Switches to another station only in the specific region using the “AF”
control. ; OFF: Cancels.
Change the frequency steps
You can change the frequency step of:
FM: 50 kHz to 200 kHz
MW: 9 kHz to 10 kHz
1 Press and hold B SRC to turn off the power.
2 While pressing number buttons 1 and 5, press B SRC.
Release your fingers from the buttons after the display appears.
• To restore the initial setting, repeat the same procedure.
• When the frequency step is changed, the previously stored stations in
the memory are deleted.
.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 5
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
5
9/12/2013 3:42:02 PM
CD / USB / iPod
RADIO
AF SET
ON: Automatically searches for another station broadcasting the same
program in the same Radio Data System network with better reception
when the current reception is poor. ; OFF: Cancels.
TI
ON: Allows the unit to temporarily switch to Traffic Information. ;
OFF: Cancels.
PTY SEARCH
Press the volume knob to enter PTY language selection. Turn the volume
knob to select the PTY language (ENGLISH/ FRENCH/ GERMAN), then
press the knob.
Selects the available Program Type (see the following), then, press
S / T to start.
Start playback
The source changes automatically and playback starts.
CD
USB
USB input terminal
CLOCK
TIME SYNC
M Eject disc
Label side
CA-U1EX (max.: 500 mA)
(optional accessory)
ON: Synchronizes the unit’s time to the Radio Data System station time. ;
OFF: Cancels.
• [MONO SET]/ [NEWS SET]/ [REGIONAL]/ [AF SET]/ [TI]/ [PTY SEARCH] is selectable
only when the band is FM1/ FM2/ FM3.
• Available Program Type:
SPEECH: NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO (information), SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
SCIENCE, VARIED, WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, DOCUMENT
MUSIC: POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES,
FOLK M (music)
The unit will search for the Program Type categorized under [SPEECH] or
[MUSIC] if selected.
• If the volume is adjusted during reception of traffic information, alarm
or news bulletin, the adjusted volume is memorized automatically. It
will be applied the next time traffic information, alarm or news bulletin
function is turned on.
and/ or
USB cable from the rear of the unit
iPod/iPhone
USB input terminal
KCA-iP102 (optional
accessory) or accessory
cable of the iPod/iPhone*1
and/ or
USB cable from the rear of the unit
Press 5 iPod to select the control mode while in iPod source.
MODE ON: From the iPod*2.
MODE OFF: From the unit.
If you connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB input terminal of the unit
(while listening to TuneIn Radio, TuneIn Radio Pro or Aupeo), the unit
will output the sound from these apps.
6
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 6
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:02 PM
Select a track/file from a list
To
Do this
Pause or resume
playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406).
Select a track/file
Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406).
Select a folder *3
Press J / K (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406).
Reverse/Fast-forward
Press and hold S / T (or press and hold S / T (+) on RC-406).
Repeat play *4
Random play *4
Press 4 repeatedly.
• Audio CD: TRACK REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
• MP3/WMA/WAV file or iPod: FILE REPEAT, FOLDER REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light (KME Light)/ KENWOOD Music Control
(KMC) file ( 16): FILE REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
Press 3 repeatedly.
• Audio CD: DISC RANDOM, RANDOM OFF
• MP3/WMA/WAV file or iPod or KME Light/ KMC file: FOLDER RANDOM,
RANDOM OFF
Press and hold 3 *1
*2
*3
*4
*5
to select “ALL RANDOM”. *5
Do not leave the cable inside the car when not using.
You can still play/pause, file skip, fast-forward or reverse files from the unit.
Only for MP3/WMA/WAV files. This does not work for iPod.
For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is selected.
For CD: Only for MP3/WMA files.
For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is
selected. ( 6)
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
• MP3/WMA/WAV file: Select the desired
folder, then a file.
• iPod or KME Light/ KMC file: Select the
desired file from the list (PLAYLISTS,
ARTISTS, ALBUMS, SONGS, PODCASTS*,
GENRES, COMPOSERS*).
* Only for iPod.
• To return to the root folder (or first file), press
number button 5 iPod.
• To return to the previous setting item or
hierarchy, press
.
• To cancel, press and hold
.
If you have many files....
You can search through them quickly (on step 2
above) at a preset skip search ratio by pressing
S / T.
• See also “Set the skip search ratio.” ( 8)
• Pressing and holding S / T skip songs at
the maximum ratio (10%) regardless of the
setting made.
• For USB: Only for files registered in the
database created with KME Light/ KMC.
• Not applicable for audio CD.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 7
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
7
9/12/2013 3:42:02 PM
AUX
CD / USB / iPod
Direct Music Search (using RC-406)
1 Press DIRECT.
2 Press the number buttons to enter a track/
file number.
3 Press ENT IW to search for music.
• To cancel, press .
• Not available if Random Play is selected.
• Not applicable for iPod, KME Light/ KMC file.
Select a song by name
While listening to iPod...
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to select a category,
then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter
character search.
4 Turn the volume knob to select the
character to be searched for.
5 Press S / T to move to the entry
position.
You can enter up to 3 characters.
6 Press the volume knob to start searching.
7 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
Repeat step 7 until the desired item is
selected.
• To search for a character other than A to Z
and 0 to 9, enter only “ ”.
• To return to the previous hierarchy, press
.
• To return to the top menu, press number
button 5 iPod.
• To cancel, press and hold
.
*
Preparation:
Select [ON] for [BUILT-IN AUX]. ( 4)
Set the skip search ratio
While listening to iPod or KME Light/ KMC file...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select
[SKIP SEARCH], then press the knob.
4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
0.5% (default)/ 1%/ 5%/ 10%: Skip search
ratio over the total files.
5 Press and hold
to exit.
Start listening
1 Connect a portable audio player
(commercially available).
Auxiliary input jack
3.5 mm stereo mini plug with “L”
shaped connector (commercially
available)
Change the USB drive
When a smartphone (Mass Storage Class) is
connected to the USB input terminal, you can
select its internal memory or external memory
(such as an SD card) to playback the stored songs.
You can also select the desired drive to playback
when a multiple drives device is connected.
Press 5 iPod repeatedly to select the desired
drive.
(or)
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select
[MUSIC DRIVE], then press the knob.
4 Press the volume knob to select
[DRIVE CHANGE].
The next drive is selected automatically.
Repeat steps 1 to 4 to select the following
drives.
Selectable items: [DRIVE 1] to [DRIVE 5]
Portable audio
player
2 Press B SRC to select AUX.
3 Turn on the portable audio player and
start playback.
Set the AUX name
While listening to a portable audio player
connected to the unit...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [SYSTEM],
then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select [AUX NAME
SET], then press the knob.
4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
AUX (default)/ DVD/ PORTABLE/ GAME/ VIDEO/ TV
5 Press and hold
to exit.
8
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 8
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
Pandora®
Preparation:
Install the latest version of the Pandora
application onto your device (iPhone/ iPod
touch), then create an account and log in to
Pandora.
• Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4)
To
Do this
Pause or resume playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406).
Thumbs up or thumbs down
Skip a track
Start listening
1 Open the Pandora application on your
Create a new station
device.
Save a station
USB input terminal
Search for a registered
station
and/ or
USB cable from the rear of the unit
KCA-iP102 (optional accessory) or
accessory cable of the iPod/iPhone*
Press T (or press T (+) on RC-406).
1 Press and hold the volume knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [FROM TRACK] or [FROM ARTIST],
then press the knob.
A new station is created based on the current song or artist.
2 Connect your device to the USB input
terminal.
Press J / K .
• If thumbs down is selected, the current track is skipped.
Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 5) to store.
• To select a stored station, press one of the number buttons
(1 to 5).
1 Press
.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection, then press the
knob (or press J / K on RC-406).
[BY DATE]: According to the registered date.
[A-Z]: Alphabetical order.
3 Turn the volume knob to the desired station, then press the
knob.
The source changes to PANDORA FRONT/
PANDORA REAR and broadcast starts.
* Do not leave the cable inside the car when
not using.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 9
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
BLUETOOTH®
You can operate Bluetooth devices using this unit.
Connect the microphone
MIC (Microphone input terminal)
Microphone (supplied)
Rear panel
Adjust the microphone
angle
Secure using cord clamps (not
supplied) if necessary.
If you turn off the unit or detach the control panel
during a phone call conversation, the Bluetooth
connection is disconnected. Continue the
conversation using your mobile phone.
Supported Bluetooth profiles
– Hands-Free Profile (HFP)
– Serial Port Profile (SPP)
– Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP)
– Object Push Profile (OPP)
– Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)
– Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
Pair a Bluetooth device
When connecting a Bluetooth device to
the unit for the first time, perform pairing
between the unit and the device. Once the
pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device
will remain registered in the unit even if you
reset the unit.
• Up to five devices can be registered (paired)
in total.
• A maximum of two Bluetooth phones
and one Bluetooth audio device can be
connected at any time.
• This unit supports Secure Simple Pairing
(SSP).
• Some Bluetooth devices may not
automatically connect to the unit after
pairing. Connect the device to the unit
manually. Refer to the instruction manual of
the Bluetooth device for more information.
1 Press B SRC to turn on the unit.
2 Search and select this unit model name
(KDC-X7**BT) on the Bluetooth device.
“PAIRING” “PASS XXXXXX” Device
name “PRESS” “VOLUME KNOB”
scrolls on the display.
3 Press the volume knob to start pairing.
“PAIRING OK” appears when pairing is
completed and “ ” will light up when the
Bluetooth connection is established.
• For some Bluetooth devices, you may need
to enter the Personal Identification Number
(PIN) code immediately after searching.
• Pairing request (via Bluetooth) is
automatically activated if an iPhone/iPod
touch is connected through the USB input
terminal. (Applicable only if [AUTO PAIRING] is
set to [ON].) ( 14)
Press the volume knob to pair once you
have confirm the device name.
Bluetooth test mode
You can check the connectivity of the
supported profile between the Bluetooth
device and the unit.
• Make sure there is no Bluetooth device
connected.
1 Press and hold .
“PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE” appears.
2 Search and select this unit model name
(KDC-X7**BT) on the Bluetooth device.
3 Operate the Bluetooth device to confirm
pairing.
“TESTING” flashes on the display.
The connectivity result (OK or NG) appears
after the test.
PAIRING: Pairing status
HF CNT: Hands-Free Profile (HFP)
compatibility
AUD CNT: Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP) compatibility
PB DL:
Phonebook Access profile (PBAP)
compatibility
• To cancel check mode, press and hold
B SRC to turn off the unit.
10
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 10
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth mobile phone
Improve the sound quality during a call
To
Do this
Receive a call
Press
or the volume knob or one of
the number buttons (1 to 6) (or press
on RC-406).
• All the buttons and display
illumination flash when there is an
incoming call.
During a call, the buttons and display
illuminate according to the settings
made for [DISPLAY]. ( 16)
• When [AUTO ANSWER] is set to the
selected time, the unit answers
incoming call automatically. ( 12)
Reject an incoming
call
Press B SRC (or press
End a call
Press
or B SRC (or press
RC-406).
on RC-406).
on
Switch between
hands-free and
private talk modes
Press 6 IW during a call.
• Operations may vary according to the
connected Bluetooth device.
Adjust the phone
volume
Turn the volume knob during a call.
Phone volume: [00] to [35] (Default: [15])
• This adjustment will not affect the
volume of the other sources.
Switch between two
connected phones
Press
repeatedly.
• Not applicable during a call.
While talking on the phone...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table), then
press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
MIC GAIN
–20 — +8 (0): The sensitivity of the microphone increases as the number
increased.
NR LEVEL
–5 — –20 (–10): Adjust the noise reduction level until the least noise is being
heard during a phone conversation.
ECHO CANCEL
1 — 10 (4): Adjust the echo cancellation delay time until the least echo is being
heard during a phone conversation.
Text message notification
When the phone receives a text message, the unit rings and “SMS RECEIVED”
appears.
• You cannot read, edit, or send a message through the unit.
• To clear the message, press any button.
Use Voice Recognition
1 Press and hold .
The connected phone (which has been paired the earliest) is activated.
However, if priority device is connected, pressing and holding
activate the
priority device. ( 13, DVC PRIORITY)
2 Speak the name of the contact you want to call or the voice command to
control the phone functions.
• Supported Voice Recognition features vary for each phone. Refer to the
instruction manual of the connected phone for details.
• This unit also supports the intelligent personal assistant function of iPhone.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 11
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
11
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth mode operations
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
3 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
CALL
HISTORY
PHONE
BOOK
NUMBER
DIAL
.
1 Press the volume knob to select a name or a phone number.
• “INCOMING”, “OUTGOING”, or “MISSED” is shown on the lower part of the
display to indicate the previous call status.
• Press DISP SCRL to change the display category (NUMBER or NAME).
• “NO DATA” appears if there is no recorded call history.
2 Press the volume knob to call.
1 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then press the knob to
call.
• If the phone supports PBAP, the phonebook of the connected phone is
automatically transferred to the unit when pairing. If the phone does not
support PBAP, “TRANSFER PB” appears. Transfer the phonebook manually.
( 14, TRANSFER PB)
• Contacts are categorized as: HOME, OFFICE, MOBILE, OTHER, GENERAL
• This unit can display only non-accent letters. (Accent letters such as “Ú” is
showns as “U”.)
• If the phonebook contains many contacts, ( Select a contact by name).
1 Turn the volume knob to select a number (0 to 9) or character ( , #, +).
2 Press S / T to move the entry position.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the phone number.
3 Press the volume knob to call.
(or using RC-406)
1 Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to enter the phone number.
2 Press to call.
VOICE
Speak the name of the contact you want to call or use the voice
command to control the phone functions. ( 11, Use Voice
Recognition)
BATT
LOW/ MID/ FULL: Shows the strength of the battery.
SIGNAL
NO SIGNAL/ LOW/ MID/ MAX: Shows the strength of the current
received signal.
SETTINGS
Default: XX
AUTO ANSWER
1 — 30: The unit answer incoming call automatically in the selected
time. ; OFF: Cancels.
RING MODE
SYSTEM: The unit rings to notify you when a call/text message comes in.
(Default ring tone is different according to the paired device.)
• CALL: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for incoming
calls.
• MESSAGE: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for
incoming text messages.
PHONE: The unit uses the connected phones’ ring tone to notify you
when a call/text message comes in. (The connected phone will ring if it
does not support this feature.)
SMS NOTIFY*
ON: The unit rings and “SMS RECEIVED” appears to notify you of an
incoming text message. ; OFF: Cancels.
* Functionality depends on the type of the phone used.
Select a contact by name
• You can search through the contacts quickly according to the first letter
(A to Z), number (0 to 9), or symbol.
• The second alphabet of the contact will be searched if the first alphabet
does not exist.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [PHONE BOOK], then press the knob.
12
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 12
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
BLUETOOTH®
3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter alphabet search mode.
The first menu (ABCDEFGHIJK) appears. To go to the other menu
(LMNOPQRSTUV or WXYZ1 ), press J / K.
4 Turn the volume knob or press S / T to select the desired first
letter, then press the knob.
• To search with numbers, select “1”.
• To search with symbols, select “ ”.
5 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the knob.
6 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then press the
knob to call.
To return to the previous hierarchy, press
.
Store a contact in memory
You can store up to 6 contacts.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY], [PHONE BOOK], or
[NUMBER DIAL], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact or enter a phone number.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number.
4 Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
“STORED” appears when the contact is stored.
To erase a contact from the preset memory, select [NUMBER DIAL] in
step 2 and store a blank number.
Make a call from memory
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
3 Press the volume knob to call.
Delete a contact
Not applicable for mobile phone that supports PBAP.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY] or [PHONE BOOK], then
press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number.
4 Press and hold the volume knob to enter delete mode.
5 Turn the volume knob to select [DELETE ONE] or [DELETE ALL], then
press the knob.
DELETE ONE: Selected name or phone number in step 3 is deleted.
DELETE ALL: All names or phone numbers from the selected menu in
step 2 is deleted.
6 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob.
Bluetooth mode settings
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [BT MODE], then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
PHONE SELECT
AUDIO SELECT
.
Default: XX
Selects the phone or audio device to connect or disconnect.
“ ” appears in front of the device name.
DEVICE DELETE
1 Turn the volume knob to select a device to delete, then press the
knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob.
DVC PRIORITY
Selects a device to be connected as priority device.
“ ” appears in front of the device name set as priority.
“NO MEMORY” appears if there is no contacts stored.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_04_EN.indd 13
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
13
26/12/2013 11:44:13 AM
BLUETOOTH®
TRANSFER PB*
PIN CODE EDIT
(0000)
RECONNECT
AUTO PAIRING
“DL PB
” appears and transfer the
phonebook of the connected phone to
this unit manually.
* Selectable only when the connected
phone supports OPP.
Changes the PIN code (up to 6 digits).
1 Turn the volume knob to select a
number.
2 Press S / T to move the entry
position.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish
entering the PIN code.
3 Press the volume knob to confirm.
ON: The unit automatically reconnect
when the Bluetooth device is within
range. ; OFF: Cancels.
Internet radio via Bluetooth
Bluetooth audio player
Listen to Pandora
Preparation:
Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4)
You can listen to Pandora on your smart
phone (Android OS) through Bluetooth on
this unit.
1 Open the Pandora application on your
device.
2 Connect to Bluetooth audio player.
( 10)
3 Press B SRC to select PANDORA.
The source switches and broadcast
starts automatically.
• You can operate Pandora in the same way
as Pandora for iPod/iPhone. ( 9)
ON: The unit automatically pair
supported Bluetooth device (iPhone/
iPod touch) when it is connected
through USB input terminal. Depending
on the iOS version of the connected
iPhone/iPod touch, this function may
not work. ; OFF: Cancels.
BT HF/AUDIO
FRONT: Ouputs audio from the front left
and right speakers. ; ALL: Outputs audio
from all the speakers.
INITIALIZE
YES: Initializes all the Bluetooth settings
(including stored pairing, phonebook,
and etc.). ; NO: Cancels.
Operations and display indications may differ
according to their availability on the connected
device.
To
Do this
Playback
1 Press B SRC (or press SRC on
RC-406) to select BT AUDIO.
2 Operate the Bluetooth audio
player to start playback.
Pause or
resume
playback
Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW
on RC-406).
Select group
or folder
Press J / K (or press *AM– /
#FM+ on RC-406).
Reverse/
forward skip
Press S / T (or press
S / T (+) on RC-406).
Reverse/fastforward
Press and hold S / T (or
press and hold S / T (+) on
RC-406).
Repeat play
Press 4 repeatedly to make a
selection.
ALL REPEAT, FILE REPEAT,
REPEAT OFF
Random
play
Press 3 repeatedly to make a
selection.
FOLDER RANDOM, RANDOM OFF
Press and hold 3 to select
“ALL RANDOM.”
14
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_04_EN.indd 14
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
26/12/2013 11:44:15 AM
AUDIO SETTINGS
While listening to any source...
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [AUDIO CONTROL], then press the
knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
then press the knob.
Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or activated.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
(or using RC-406)
1 Press AUD to enter [AUDIO CONTROL].
2 Press J / K to make a selection, then press ENT IW.
LOUDNESS
LEVEL1/ LEVEL2: Selects your preferred low and high frequencies boost
to produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume level. ; OFF: Cancels.
SUBWOOFER SET
ON: Turns on the subwoofer output. ; OFF: Cancels.
LPF SUBWOOFER
THROUGH: All signals are sent to the subwoofer. ; 85HZ/ 120HZ/
160HZ: Audio signals with frequencies lower than 85 Hz/ 120 Hz/
160 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
SUB-W PHASE
REVERSE (180°)/ NORMAL (0°): Selects the phase of the subwoofer
output to be in line with the speaker output for optimum performance.
(Selectable only if a setting other than [THROUGH] is selected for
[LPF SUBWOOFER].)
HPF
THROUGH: All signals are sent to the speakers. ; 100HZ/ 120HZ/
150HZ: Audio signals with frequencies higher than 100 Hz/ 120 Hz/
150 Hz are sent to the speakers.
SUB-W LEVEL –15 to +15 (0) Adjusts the subwoofer output level.
FADER
R15 to F15 (0): Adjusts the rear and front speaker output balance.
BAND1 LEVEL –8 to +8 (+5)
BALANCE
L15 to R15 (0): Adjusts the left and right speaker output balance.
BAND2 LEVEL –8 to +8 (+5)
VOLUME OFFSET
(Default: 0)
–8 to +8 (for AUX) ; –8 to 0 (for other sources): Presets the volume
adjustment level of each source. (Before adjustment, select the source
you want to adjust.)
SOUND RECNSTR
(Sound
reconstruction)
ON: Creates realistic sound by compensating the high-frequency
components and restoring the rise-time of the waveform that are lost in
audio data compression. ; OFF: Cancels.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
BAND3 LEVEL –8 to +8 (+4)
BAND4 LEVEL –8 to +8 (+5)
Adjusts the level to memorize for each source. (Before
making an adjustment, select the source you want to
adjust.)
BAND5 LEVEL –8 to +8 (+1)
PRESET EQ
DRIVE EQ/ TOP40/ POWERFUL/ ROCK/ POPS/ EASY/ JAZZ/ NATURAL/
USER: Selects a preset equalizer suitable to the music genre. (Select [USER]
to use the customized BAND1 to BAND5 settings.)
[DRIVE EQ] is a preset equalizer that reduces noise from the road.
BASS BOOST
LEVEL1/ LEVEL2/ LEVEL3: Selects your preferred bass boost level. ;
OFF: Cancels.
[SUB-W LEVEL]/ [LPF SUBWOOFER]/ [SUB-W PHASE] is selectable only if
[SUBWOOFER SET] is set to [ON].
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 15
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
15
9/12/2013 3:42:03 PM
DISPLAY SETTINGS
MORE INFORMATION
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [DISPLAY],
General
• This unit can only play the following CDs:
About KENWOOD Music Editor Light and
KENWOOD Music Control
• Detailed information and notes about the playable
audio files are stated in an online manual on the
following web site: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
audiofile/
• This unit supports the PC application KENWOOD Music Editor Light
and Android™ application KENWOOD Music Control.
• When you play audio files with song data added using the KENWOOD
Music Editor Light or KENWOOD Music Control, you can search for
audio files by Genres, Artists, Albums, Playlists, and Songs.
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light and KENWOOD Music Control are
available on the following web site: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
Playable files
About iPod/iPhone
• Playable audio file: MP3 (.mp3), WMA (.wma)
• Playable disc media: CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROM
• Playable disc file format: ISO 9660 Level 1/2, Joliet,
Long file name.
• Playable USB device file system: FAT12, FAT16,
FAT32
Even when audio files comply with the standards
listed above, playback may be impossible depending
on the types or conditions of media or device.
Made for
- iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th generation)
- iPod classic
- iPod nano (3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th generation)
- iPhone, iPhone 3G, 3GS, 4, 4S, 5
• For the latest compatible list and software versions of iPhone/
iPod, see: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod
• You cannot operate iPod if “KENWOOD” or “ ” is displayed on
iPod.
Unplayable discs
About Pandora
• Discs that are not round.
• Discs with coloring on the recording surface or discs
that are dirty.
• Recordable/ReWritable discs that have not been
finalized.
• 8 cm CD. Attempting to insert using an adapter may
cause malfunction.
• Pandora is available only in the U.S., Australia and New Zealand.
• Because Pandora is a third-party service, the specifications are
subject to change without prior notice. Accordingly, compatibility
may be impaired, or some or all of the services may become
unavailable.
• Some functions of Pandora cannot be operated from this unit.
• For issues using the application, please contact Pandora at
pandora-support@pandora.com.
then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection
(see the following table), then press the
knob.
Repeat step 3 until the desired item is
selected or activated.
4 Press and hold
to exit.
To return to the previous setting item or
hierarchy, press
.
Default: XX
COLOR SELECT VARIABLE SCAN/ COLOR 01 —
COLOR 24/ USER: Selects your preferred
key and display illumination color.
You can create your own color (when
[COLOR 01] — [COLOR 24] or [USER] is
selected). The color you have created can
be selected when you select [USER].
1 Press and hold the volume knob to
enter the detailed color adjustment.
2 Press S / T to select the color (R/
G/ B) to adjust.
3 Turn the volume knob to adjust the
level (0 — 9), then press the knob.
DIMMER
ON: Dims the display and button
illumination. ; OFF: Illuminates according
to the [BRIGHTNESS] settings.
BRIGHTNESS
0 — 31: Selects your preferred brightness
level for display and button illumination.
TEXT SCROLL
AUTO/ ONCE: Selects whether to scroll the
display information automatically, or scroll
only once. ; OFF: Cancels.
About USB devices
• This unit can play MP3/WMA/WAV files stored on a
USB mass storage class device.
• You cannot connect a USB device via a USB hub.
• Connecting a cable whose total length is longer
than 5 m may result in abnormal playback.
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose
rating is other than 5 V and exceeds 1 A.
About Bluetooth
• Depending on the Bluetooth version of the device, some Bluetooth
devices may not be able to connect to this unit.
• This unit may not work with some Bluetooth devices.
• Signal conditions vary, depending on the surroundings.
• For more information about Bluetooth, visit the following website:
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
16
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 16
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:04 PM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
Sound cannot be heard.
“PROTECT” appears and no
operations can be done.
• Sound cannot be heard.
• The unit does not turn on.
• Information shown on the
display is incorrect.
The unit does not work at all.
Remedy
• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
• Check the cords and connections.
Check to be sure the terminals of the speaker wires are
insulated properly, then reset the unit. If this does not
solve the problem, consult your nearest service center.
Clean the connectors. ( 2)
Reset the unit. ( 3)
• Connect the antenna firmly.
• Radio reception is poor.
• Static noise while listening to • Pull the antenna out all the way.
the radio.
Symptom
Remedy
“NA DEVICE” appears.
Connect a supported USB device, and check the connections.
“NO MUSIC” appears.
Connect a USB device that contains playable audio files.
“iPod ERROR” appears.
• Reconnect the iPod.
• Reset the iPod.
Noise is generated.
Skip to another track or change the disc.
Tracks do not play back as
you intended them to play.
Playback order is determined when files are recorded.
“READING” keeps flashing.
Do not use too many hierarchical levels or folders.
Elapsed playing time is not
correct.
This is caused by how the tracks are recorded.
Correct characters are not
displayed (e.g. album name).
This unit can only display uppercase letters, numbers, and a
limited number of symbols.
Make sure the disc contains supported audio files. ( 16)
Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.
“ADD ERROR”
“SEARCH ERROR”
New station creation is unsuccessful.
“NO DISC” appears.
“TOC ERROR” appears.
Make sure the disc is clean and inserted properly.
“CHECK DEVICE”
Check the Pandora application on your device.
“PLEASE EJECT” appears.
Reset the unit. If this does not solve the problem, consult
your nearest service center.
“NO SKIPS”
The skip limit has been reached.
“NO STATIONS”
No stations are found.
Disc cannot be ejected.
Press and hold M to forcibly eject the disc. Be careful not
to drop the disc when it is ejected. If this does not solve
the problem, reset the unit. ( 3)
“STATION LIMIT”
The number of registered stations has reached its limit. Retry
after deleting unnecessary stations from your device.
“READ ERROR” appears.
Copy the files and folders onto the USB device again. If this
does not solve the problem, reset the USB device or use
another USB device.
“UPGRADE APP”
Make sure you have installed the latest version of the
Pandora application on your device.
“CONNECT ERROR”
Communication is unstable.
Connect a USB device, and change the source to USB again.
“RATING ERROR”
Registration of thumbs up/thumbs down has failed.
A copy-protected file is played.
“LICENSE ERROR”
You try to access from a country which Pandora is not
deliverable.
“NO DEVICE” appears.
“COPY PRO” appears.
Pandora
“NA FILE” appears.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 17
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
17
9/12/2013 3:42:04 PM
SPECIFICATIONS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom
FM
• Search from the Bluetooth device again.
• Reset the unit. ( 3)
Pairing cannot be made.
• Make sure you have entered the same PIN code to both the unit and Bluetooth
device.
• Delete pairing information from both the unit and the Bluetooth device, then
perform pairing again. ( 10)
The number of registered devices has reached its limit. Retry after deleting an
unnecessary device. ( 13, DEVICE DELETE)
Echo or noise occurs.
• Adjust the microphone unit’s position. ( 10)
• Check the [ECHO CANCEL] setting. ( 11)
Phone sound quality is poor.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth device.
• Move the car to a place where you can get a better signal reception.
• Voice calling method is not
successful.
• “N/A VOICE TAG” appears.
• Use voice calling method in a more quiet environment.
• Reduce the distance from the microphone when you speak the name.
• Make sure the same voice as the registered voice tag is used.
Tuner
“DEVICE FULL” appears.
Bluetooth®
Remedy
No Bluetooth device is
detected.
“NOT SUPPORT” appears.
The connected phone does not support Voice Recognition feature.
• “NO ENTRY” appears.
• “NO PAIR” appears.
There is no registered device connected/found via Bluetooth.
“ERROR” appears.
Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again, check if the device supports
the function you have tried.
“NO INFO” appears.
Bluetooth device cannot get the contact information.
Sound is being interrupted or
skipped during playback of a
Bluetooth audio player.
• Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth audio player.
• Turn off, then turn on the unit and try to connect again.
• Other Bluetooth devices might be trying to connect to the unit.
The connected Bluetooth
audio player cannot be
controlled.
• Check whether the connected Bluetooth audio player supports Audio/Video
Remote Control Profile (AVRCP). (Refer to the instructions of your audio player.)
• Disconnect and connect the Bluetooth player again.
• “HF ERROR XX” appears.
• “BT ERROR” appears.
Reset the unit and try the operation again. If this does not solve the problem,
consult your nearest service center.
Frequency Range
87.5 MHz — 108.0 MHz
(50 kHz space)
87.9 MHz — 107.9 MHz
(200 kHz space)
Channel Space Selection
50 kHz/ 200 kHz
Usable Sensitivity
(S/N = 26 dB)
8.2 dBf (0.71 μV/75 Ω)
Quieting Sensitivity
(DIN S/N = 46 dB)
17.2 dBf (2.0 μV/75 Ω)
Frequency Response
30 Hz — 15 kHz (±3 dB)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
64 dB (MONO)
Stereo Separation
40 dB (1 kHz)
MW/ SW1/ SW2
Frequency
Range
Band 1
(MW)
531 kHz to 1 611 kHz
(9 kHz space)
530 kHz to 1 700 kHz
(10 kHz space)
Band 2
(SW1)
2 940 kHz to 7 735 kHz
(5 kHz space)
Band 3
(SW2)
9 500 kHz to 10 135 kHz/
11 580 kHz to 18 135 kHz
(5 kHz space)
Channel Space Band 1
9 kHz/10 kHz
Selection
Band 2/ 3 5 kHz
Usable
Sensitivity
(S/N = 20 dB)
MW
29.0 dBμ (28.2 μV)
SW
30 dBμ (32 μV)
18
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 18
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:04 PM
GaAIAs
8 times over sampling
Profile
Spindle Speed
500 rpm — 200 rpm (CLV)
Wow & Flutter
Below measurable limit
Frequency Response (±1 dB)
20 Hz — 20 kHz
Total Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
0.01 %
Maximum Output Power
50 W × 4
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (1 kHz)
105 dB
Full Bandwidth Power
22 W × 4 (at less than 1 % THD)
Dynamic Range
90 dB
Speaker Impedance
4 Ω — 8 Ω
Channel Separation
85 dB
Tone Action
Band1
100 Hz ±8 dB
MP3 Decode
Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3
Band2
250 Hz ±8 dB
WMA Decode
Compliant with Windows Media Audio
Band3
630 Hz ±8 dB
Band4
2.5 kHz ±8 dB
Band5
6.3 kHz ±8 dB
USB Standard
USB 1.1, USB 2.0 (Full speed)
File System
FAT12/ 16/ 32
Maximum Supply Current
DC 5 V MP3 Decode
Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3
WMA Decode
Compliant with Windows Media Audio
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
PBAP (Phonebook Access Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile)
Audio
Bluetooth
Laser Diode
Digital Filter (D/A)
Auxiliary 1 A
Preout Level/Load (CD)
4 000 mV/10 kΩ
Preout Impedance
≤ 600 Ω
Frequency Response (±3 dB)
20 Hz — 20 kHz
Input Maximum Voltage
1 000 mV
Input Impedance
30 kΩ
WAV Decode
Linear-PCM
Version
Bluetooth Ver.2.1+EDR Certified
Frequency Range
2.402 GHz — 2.480 GHz
Operating Voltage
14.4 V (10.5 V — 16 V allowable)
Output Power
+4 dBm (MAX), 0 dBm (AVE) Power Class 2
Maximum Current Consumption
10 A
Maximum Communication Range
Line of sight approx. 10 m
General Bluetooth
USB
CD player
SPECIFICATIONS
Operational Temperature Range
0°C — +40°C
Installation Size (W × H × D)
182 mm × 53 mm × 159 mm
Weight
1.2 kg
Subject to change without notice.
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_03_EN.indd 19
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
19
16/12/2013 12:01:51 PM
INSTALLATION / CONNECTION
Warning
• The unit can only be used with a 12 V DC power supply, negative
ground.
• Disconnect the battery’s negative terminal before wiring and mounting.
• Do not connect Battery wire (yellow) and Ignition wire (red) to the
car chassis or Ground wire (black) to prevent a short circuit.
• Insulate unconnected wires with vinyl tape to prevent a short circuit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Installing the unit (in-dash mounting)
Do the required
wiring. ( 21)
Hook on the top side
Caution
• For safety’s sake, leave wiring and mounting to professionals.
Consult the car audio dealer.
• Install this unit in the console of your vehicle. Do not touch the metal
parts of this unit during and shortly after use of the unit. Metal parts
such as the heat sink and enclosure become hot.
• Do not connect the [ wires of speakers to the car chassis or Ground
wire (black), or connect them in parallel.
• Mount the unit at an angle of less than 30º.
• If your vehicle wiring harness does not have the ignition terminal,
connect Ignition wire (red) to the terminal on the vehicle’s fuse box
which provides 12 V DC power supply and is turned on and off by the
ignition key.
• After the unit is installed, check whether the brake lamps, blinkers,
wipers, etc. on the car are working properly.
• If the fuse blows, first make sure the wires are not touching car’s
chassis, then replace the old fuse with one that has the same rating.
Basic procedure
1 Remove the key from the ignition switch, then
2
3
4
5
disconnect the [ terminal of the car battery.
Connect the wires properly.
See Wiring connection. ( 21)
Install the unit to your car.
See Installing the unit (in-dash mounting).
Connect the [ terminal of the car battery.
Reset the unit. ( 3)
Orientate the trim
plate as illustrated
before fitting.
Dashboard of
your car
Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
mounting sleeve firmly in place.
When installing without the mounting sleeve
1 Remove the mounting sleeve and trim plate from
the unit.
2 Align the holes in the unit (on both sides) with the
vehicle mounting bracket and secure the unit with
screws (commercially available).
Use only the specified screws. Using wrong screws might damage the unit.
How to remove the unit
1 Detach the faceplate.
2 Fit the catch pin on the extraction keys
into the holes on both sides of the trim
plate, then pull it out.
3 Insert the extraction keys deeply into the
slots on each side, then follow the arrows
as shown on the right.
20
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_01_EN.indd 20
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
9/12/2013 3:42:04 PM
Wiring connection
Front/rear/subwoofer output
Antenna terminal
MIC (Microphone input terminal) ( 10)
Part list for
installation
USB cable
(A) Faceplate
Fuse (10 A)
If no connections are made, do not let the wire
come out from the tab.
White
To front speaker (left)
White/Black
To front speaker (right)
Gray/Black
Gray
Light blue/yellow
(Steering remote
control wire)
(B) Trim plate
To the steering wheel remote control
adapter
(C) Mounting sleeve
Green
To rear speaker (left)
Green/Black
Purple
To rear speaker (right)
Blue/White
(Power control wire/
Antenna control wire)
To the power control terminal when using
the optional power amplifier, or to the
antenna control terminal in the vehicle.
Purple/Black
(D) Wiring harness
Ignition switch
Car fuse box
Red
Brown
(Ignition wire)
(Mute control wire)
To connect the Kenwood navigation system,
refer your navigations manual.
Yellow
Car fuse box
(Battery wire)
(E) Extraction key
Black (Ground wire)
Battery
To the metallic body or chassis
of the car
ENGLISH |
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_04_EN.indd 21
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
21
26/12/2013 11:47:57 AM
The marking of products using lasers
The label is attached to the chassis/case and says that the component uses laser beams that
have been classified as Class 1. It means that the unit is utilizing laser beams that are of a
weaker class. There is no danger of hazardous radiation outside the unit.
• “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified
by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please
note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
22
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_02_EN.indd 22
Data Size:
Book Size:
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
13/12/2013 12:02:33 PM
• “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified
by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please
note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬/ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬.‫ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬.‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
.‫ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
٢٢
JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 22
3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫‪) MIC‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ( ) ‪(١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،Kenwood‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ(‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪ (C‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺿﻔﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ [ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.°٣٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪(٢١ ) .‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ [ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪(٢١ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﹰ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ١٠٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪ ٨٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪32 /16 /FAT12‬‬
‫‪) USB 2.0 ،USB 1.1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Windows Media Audio‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ + Bluetooth‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪EDR Certified‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WAV‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪٪ ٠٫٠١‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Windows Media Audio‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ × ‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ × ‪) ٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪ ١‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭﻡ — ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٠٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٦٣٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٢,٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٦٫٣‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٤ ٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ±١‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫‪ ٢٫٤٠٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٫٤٨٠‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٤+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻟﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ — ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻟﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫)‪(CLV‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(D/A‬‬
‫‪GaAIAs‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) HFP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪) SPP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ(‬
‫‪) PBAP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬
‫‪) OPP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ(‬
‫‪) A2DP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬
‫‪) AVRCP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ )ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪(CD‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫≥ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ±٣‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١ ٠٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺮﺽ × ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫× ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٤,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ‪ ١٠,٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ — ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ — ‪ ٤٠+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ‬
‫‪ ١٨٢‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ ٥٣‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ ١٥٩‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DEVICE FULL‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“N/A VOICE TAG‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NOT SUPPORT‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO ENTRY‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO PAIR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“ERROR‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO INFO‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“HF ERROR XX‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“BT ERROR‬‬
‫‪FM‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(١٠ ) .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٢٦ = S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﺪﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ ٤٦ = DIN S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪(DEVICE DELETE ،١٣ ) .‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪(١٠ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(١١ ) .[ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻭﺀﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪/‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “ERROR‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪) .(AVRCP‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ‬
‫‪MW/ SW1/ SW2‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫)‪(MW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫)‪(SW1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫)‪(SW2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٣ /٢‬‬
‫‪MW‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪SW‬‬
‫)‪= S/N‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٨٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ —‬
‫‪ ١٠٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٨٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٠٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٢٠٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ ٠٫٧١‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٧٥ /‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠) dBf ١٧٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٧٥‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)‪ ±٣‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٣١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٦١١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٧٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٢ ٩٤٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٧ ٧٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٩ ٥٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪١٠ ١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١١ ٥٨٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٨ ١٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٢٨٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA DEVICE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “PROTECT‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪(٢ ) .‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ”‪ “READING‬ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﻫﺮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻓﻆ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ • ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA FILE‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO DISC‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“TOC ERROR‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪(١٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“PLEASE EJECT‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“READ ERROR‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“COPY PRO‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ M‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﺼﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO DEVICE‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“ADD ERROR‬‬
‫”‪“SEARCH ERROR‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“CHECK DEVICE‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“NO STATIONS‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“NO SKIPS‬‬
‫‪Pandora‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“iPod ERROR‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟـ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫”‪“STATION LIMIT‬‬
‫”‪“UPGRADE APP‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“CONNECT ERROR‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“LICENSE ERROR‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫”‪“RATING ERROR‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:26 PM‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 17‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪— COLOR 01 /VARIABLE SCAN COLOR SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :USER /COLOR 24‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [COLOR 24] — [COLOR 01‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪) - (١‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪ (٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪) (B /G /R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻲ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪DIMMER‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻌﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪.[BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫‪ :31 — 0 BRIGHTNESS‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ONCE /AUTO TEXT SCROLL‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،(.mp3) MP3 :‬‬
‫‪(.wma) WMA‬‬
‫• ﻣﻴﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪CD-ROM/CD-RW/CD-R‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ISO 9660 :‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،٢/١‬ﺟﻮﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،FAT12 :‬‬
‫‪FAT32 ،FAT16‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨ CD‬ﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪WAV/WMA/MP3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫‪KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.Android™ KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫‪Made for‬‬
‫ ‪ 4th ،3rd ،2nd ،1st) iPod touch‬ﻭ ‪(5th generation‬‬‫ ‪iPod classic‬‬‫ ‪ 6th ،5th ،4th ،3rd) iPod nano‬ﻭ ‪(7th generation‬‬‫ ‪5 ،4S ،4 ،3GS ،iPhone 3G ،iPhone‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،iPod/iPhone‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”‪ “KENWOOD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫” “ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Pandora‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.pandora-support@pandora.com‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ :‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 16‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUDIO CONTROL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ AUD‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENT IW‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ –15 SUB-W LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (0) +15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪ –8 BAND2 LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+5) +8‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪ –8 BAND3 LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+4) +8‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ –8 BAND4 LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+5) +8‬‬
‫‪ –8 BAND5 LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+1) +8‬‬
‫‪BASS BOOST‬‬
‫‪SUBWOOFER SET‬‬
‫‪LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪SUB-W PHASE‬‬
‫‪HPF‬‬
‫‪ –8 BAND1 LEVEL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+5) +8‬‬
‫‪PRESET EQ‬‬
‫‪LOUDNESS‬‬
‫‪/JAZZ /EASY /POPS /ROCK /POWERFUL /TOP40 /DRIVE EQ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎ ﹺﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :USER /NATURAL‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [USER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BAND1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪BAND5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫]‪ [DRIVE EQ‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪FADER‬‬
‫‪BALANCE‬‬
‫‪VOLUME OFFSET‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(0 :‬‬
‫‪SOUND RECNSTR‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ :LEVEL2 /LEVEL1‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪/120HZ /85HZ‬‬
‫‪ :160HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٦٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(°٠) NORMAL /(°١٨٠) REVERSE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‪) .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [THROUGH‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫]‪(.[LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬؛ ‪/100HZ‬‬
‫‪ :150HZ /120HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٥٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ R15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) F15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ L15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) R15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +8‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (AUX‬؛ ‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [SUB-W PHASE] /[LPF SUBWOOFER] /[SUB-W LEVEL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫‪ :LEVEL3 /LEVEL2 /LEVEL1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 15‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪*TRANSFER PB‬‬
‫‪PIN CODE EDIT‬‬
‫)‪(0000‬‬
‫‪RECONNECT‬‬
‫‪AUTO PAIRING‬‬
‫‪BT HF/AUDIO‬‬
‫‪INITIALIZE‬‬
‫‪ “DL PB‬ﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪(OPP‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬
‫)‪ (iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ iOS‬ﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :FRONT‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :ALL‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :YES‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ (Android‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫) ‪(١٠‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.PANDORA‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Pandora‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(٩ ) .iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪) BT AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) K / J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫–‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،FILE REPEAT ،ALL REPEAT‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RANDOM OFF ،FOLDER RANDOM‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 14‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )‪ .(ABCDEFGHIJK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫)‪ LMNOPQRSTUV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،( WXYZ1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.K / J‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ “‪.”1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ ،[NUMBER DIAL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “STORED‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [NUMBER DIAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO MEMORY‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.PBAP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [DELETE ONE‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[DELETE ALL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DELETE ONE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ :DELETE ALL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[BT MODE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪PHONE SELECT‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SELECT‬‬
‫‪DEVICE DELETE‬‬
‫‪DVC PRIORITY‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫” “ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫” “ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 13‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪CALL‬‬
‫‪HISTORY‬‬
‫‪PHONE‬‬
‫‪BOOK‬‬
‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫‪DIAL‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ “INCOMING‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “OUTGOING‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “MISSED‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ NUMBER‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(NAME‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO DATA‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PBAP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪،PBAP‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ .“TRANSFER PB‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪(TRANSFER PB ،١٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪،OTHER ،MOBILE ،OFFICE ،HOME :‬‬
‫‪GENERAL‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “Ú‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ”‪(.“U‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ) ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ) ‪.(+ ،# ،‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ S / T‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪VOICE‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،١١ ) .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪SIGNAL‬‬
‫‪ :MAX /MID /LOW /NO SIGNAL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪BATT‬‬
‫‪ :FULL /MID /LOW‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪SETTINGS‬‬
‫‪AUTO ANSWER‬‬
‫‪RING MODE‬‬
‫‪*SMS NOTIFY‬‬
‫‪ :30 —1‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SYSTEM‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :CALL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪ (TONE 1 — 5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :MESSAGE‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪(TONE 1 — 5‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :PHONE‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻋﻤﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “SMS RECEIVED‬ﻹﺑﻼﻏﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Z‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪0‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 12‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻴﺊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻷﺟﻞ ]‪(١٦ ) .[DISPLAY‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUTO ANSWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪(١٢ ) .‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6 IW‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ [00] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [35‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪:‬‬
‫]‪([15‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪MIC GAIN‬‬
‫‪NR LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫‪ :(0) +8 — –20‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(–10) –20 — –5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :(4) 10 — 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪.“SMS RECEIVED‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪،١٣ ) .‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪(DVC PRIORITY‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPhone‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﹰ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:27 PM‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 11‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(MIC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻣﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪(SPP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ )‪(OPP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(AVRCP‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )‪.(SSP‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪(KDC-X7**BT‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫”‪ “PASS XXXXXX” “PAIRING‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫”‪ - “VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “PAIRING OK‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ” “ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )‪ (PIN‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ )ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPod touch‬ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑـ ‪) .USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫]‪) [AUTO PAIRING‬ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪[ON‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪(١٤ ) (.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪(KDC-X7**BT‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “TESTING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) (NG‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PAIRING‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ :HF CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬
‫‪ :AUD CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫‪:PB DL‬‬
‫)‪(PBAP‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪B SRC‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:28 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 10‬‬
‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫)‪ ،(iPod touch /iPhone‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Pandora‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/PANDORA FRONT‬‬
‫‪ PANDORA) PANDORA REAR‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬‬
‫‪ PANDORA‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.K / J‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [FROM TRACK‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [FROM ARTIST‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫]‪ :[BY DATE‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[A-Z‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(5‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(5‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:28 PM‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 9‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB / CD‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،iPod‬ﻣﻠﻒ ‪/KME Light‬‬
‫‪.KMC‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪...iPod‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﹼ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪...KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[SKIP SEARCH‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺪﻳﺪﺤﺗ ﺀﺍﺮﺟﻹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 0.5%‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪ :10% /5% /1% /‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SD‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ(‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[MUSIC DRIVE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪.[DRIVE CHANGE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ [DRIVE 1] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[DRIVE 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪(٤ ) .[BUILT-IN AUX‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ ‪٣٫٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪“L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.AUX‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[SYSTEM‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUX NAME SET‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪/VIDEO /GAME /PORTABLE /DVD /‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:28 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 8‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ *‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) K / J‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ –‪ #FM+/*AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪REPEAT OFF ،TRACK REPEAT :‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪REPEAT OFF ،FOLDER REPEAT ،FILE REPEAT :iPod‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪KENWOOD Music /(KME Light) KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF ،FILE REPEAT :(١٦ ) (KMC) Control‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪RANDOM OFF ،DISC RANDOM :‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪،FOLDER RANDOM :KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫‪RANDOM OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫”‪٥* .“ALL RANDOM‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[MODE OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.WMA/MP3‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪(٦ ) .[MODE OFF‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ :WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ :KMC /KME Light‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪،ARTISTS ،PLAYLISTS‬‬
‫‪،GENRES ،*PODCASTS ،SONGS ،ALBUMS‬‬
‫‪.(*COMPOSERS‬‬
‫* ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪...‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.T / S‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪(٨ ) .‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ“ ﹰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪ (%١٠‬ﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪.KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:28 PM‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪iPod / USB / CD‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪AF SET‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ Radio Data System‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺊ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪PTY SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ .PTY‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ،(GERMAN /FRENCH /ENGLISH) PTY‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪T / S‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪TIME SYNC‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪TI‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ M‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪CLOCK‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[PTY SEARCH] /[TI] /[AF SET] /[REGIONAL] /[NEWS SET] /[MONO SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪:‬‬
‫‪) INFO ،AFFAIRS ،NEWS :SPEECH‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪،CULTURE ،DRAMA ،EDUCATE ،SPORT ،‬‬
‫‪PHONE ،RELIGION ،SOCIAL ،CHILDREN ،FINANCE ،WEATHER ،VARIED ،SCIENCE‬‬
‫‪DOCUMENT ،LEISURE ،TRAVEL ،IN‬‬
‫‪) POP M :MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) ROCK M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) EASY M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) LIGHT M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) OTHER M ،CLASSICS‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) NATION M ،COUNTRY ،JAZZ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،OLDIES ،‬‬
‫‪) FOLK M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺗﺤﺖ ]‪ [SPEECH‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MUSIC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪) CA-U1EX‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪(mA ٥٠٠ :‬‬
‫)ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪١*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫‪ :MODE ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.٢*iPod‬‬
‫‪ :MODE OFF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ TuneIn Radio‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TuneIn Radio Pro‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Aupeo‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:29 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.TUNER‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J BAND‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪#FM+ / *AM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟـ ‪ :S / T‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K SEEK‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AUTO1‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AUTO2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :MANUAL‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (6‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠ : FM‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٩ :MW‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ ،5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B SRC‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DIRECT‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٠١‬ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫‪LOCAL SEEK‬‬
‫‪AUTO MEMORY‬‬
‫‪MONO SET‬‬
‫‪NEWS SET‬‬
‫‪REGIONAL‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ SW2 /SW1 /MW‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :YES‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪) .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [NORMAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪(.[PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫) ‪(٤‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﻩ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ”‪ .“AF‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:29 PM‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫‪SP SELECT‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫”‪“VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS” “CANCEL DEMO‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [YES‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DEMO OFF‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK ADJUST‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK FORMAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [12H‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[24H‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.STANDBY‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪EASY MENU‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫‪PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM‬‬
‫‪KEY BEEP‬‬
‫‪TDF ALARM‬‬
‫‪ :OEM /6/9 × 6 /4/5 /OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪-٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪-٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪-٩×٦ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪-٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪OEM‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫]‪ .[FUNCTION‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫]‪(١٦ ) .[COLOR SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :NORMAL‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫)‪ .(SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬؛ ‪ :MIX‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ACC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ .OFF‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :ON PANDORA SRC‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ PANDORA‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٩ ) .‬‬
‫‪ :ON BUILT-IN AUX‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ AUX‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٨ ) .‬‬
‫‪CD READ‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :2‬ﻳﺠﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺄﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪F/W UPDATE‬‬
‫‪UPDATE SYSTEM/ UPDATE BT‬‬
‫‪ :YES F/W UP xx.xx‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:29 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 4‬‬
‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.B SRC‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪( .‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ VOL‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.VOL‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ATT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬
‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:30 PM‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪iPod / USB / CD‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ) ‪ (XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪:(RC-406‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻮ ﹰﻗﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:30 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 2‬‬
‫‪KDC-X700BT‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪3/1/2014 12:46:30 PM‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KDC_X700BT_MWM0_AR_01.indd 1‬‬